<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ellaine</id>
	<title>eStyle - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ellaine"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/Special:Contributions/Ellaine"/>
	<updated>2026-08-28T13:22:23Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.6</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=236</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=236"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:40:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=235</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=235"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:39:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=234</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=234"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:38:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.[[Image:1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=233</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=233"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:35:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.[[:File:1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=232</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=232"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:33:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.[[File:1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=231</id>
		<title>Manage Home Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Home_Page&amp;diff=231"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:32:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Home Page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the upper left hand corner of the admin page you will see several links, Admin Home, Manage Home Page, Manage Collections\Categories, Manage Products, and Page Manager. You are currently on the Admin Home, click the link for Manage Home Page. This will bring you to the Manage Home Page.[[File:1.jpg|caption]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If you think of your new eFashionCentral.com website as your ‘virtual store,’ you can think of your home page as your store front. In some cases it will be the first thing your potential customer sees.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you will be integrating a custom designed website with your eFashionCentral.com virtual store and you will not be using your eFashionCentral.com program to create a Home Page then you can skip to the next section &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Manage Collections/Categories&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; (page 5). We will work with you and/or your web designer to integrate your existing website with your eFashioncentral.com virtual store.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# If look at the Manage Home Page you will see it is broken up into four boxes, each one focusing on what you are changing about your home page. These boxes are called, Site Look and Feel, Home Page Text, Home Page Photo, and Featured Products. First look at the box that says Site Look and Feel.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice is a drop down bar with different Designs listed; the second thing you will notice is that Design 5 is missing! This is because Design 5 is our blank IFrame template. This is only available to advanced users that are familiar with CSS web design programming. If you are ort plan to hire a web designer to create your own unique website then we will add Design 5 to your options. Once you select one of the Design options the colors that are available in that design will appear in the Pick a new color scheme drop down bar. If you wish to keep the Design you have selected butwant to change the color, you still must select the Design first for the colors to appear in the drop down bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the Home Page Text box you will see the words “Your current home page text” above a white text box. Home page text is a verbal introduction to your store. This is where you will put a quick blurb about your store. If your store has a motto or a slogan this is where you would put it. If not put in a short message about the store. I would suggest no more than one sentence. Just something to catch the eye. When you have thought about what you will type in the text box, type it in and click submit. Don’t forget that at any time if you want to view the changes you are making to your site just pull up the eFashionCentral.com site and click the refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
# The second box says Home Page Photo. This is where you are going to put a photo that will introduce the customer to the website. This can be a picture of yourself, or a picture of the store front, but we prefer that a picture of a dress is used as it adds a professional, elegant look to the home page. To enter a picture into the Home Page Photo you first have to find a suitable photo.&lt;br /&gt;
# This next bit will explain the finer points of saving a photo to your computer. It is by no means the only way to save a photo but I believe it is the easiest way to learn. Open up a third Internet browser. In this address bar type in the web address of any of your supplies that have images on their website. Navigate the site to find the place where you can view the collection. Once you have found the image you want to put on your website be sure to access the largest image available on the supplier’s website; usually there is a click to enlarge, use that image whenever possible. Once you have the image on your screen Right click anywhere on the picture. A grey box will appear with several options in it. One of those options is Save Picture As… Click that option. A box will come up that says &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;S&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;ave Picture. At the top of the box to the left of where it says Save in: there is a drop down box. Click the arrow and select Desktop from the drop down menu. To the right of the drop down box are several icons, click the one that is a manila folder with a small starburst coming out of the top of it. This will create a new folder. Name your new folder eFashionCentral Pictures and press enter, then click the Open button in the lower right hand corner. Where it says Save in: will have changed from saying Desktop to saying eFashionCentral Pictures and the Open button will have changed into a Save button. Click the Save button. Close the manufacturer’s website. You should now be looking at the Manage Home Page. In the Home Page Photo box you will see the words Browse to upload a new file: with a white text box next to it. Next to the text box is a button that says Browse… click on the Browse… button. A box will come up that says Choose File. At the top of the Choose File box you will see the words Look in: with a drop down box next to them. Click the arrow to open the dropdown menu and select Desktop. Double-click on the folder that says eFashionCentral Pictures and select the file you just saved. Click the Open button in the lower right hand corner of the box. Click Submit in the Home Page Photo box. There you have the basics of saving and uploading a file from the Internet to your eFashionCentral.com website. You obviously will not want to keep that picture up on your homepage, but the same format applies to saving and uploading any picture from the Internet so find one you like and, using the same steps put in on your home page photo. NOTE: the height of the picture must be big enough to reach the top of the eFashionCentral.com homepage box, if it is not it will automatically resize the picture to fill the space oftentimes distorting the picture. You should resize the photo first before you upload it if possible, the best dimensions for the home page photo is a height of 457 pixels at 72 dpi and a width of no more then 400 pixels. If you right click on a picture and click properties you can see these dimensions. The first number is the width and the second is the height. If you are uploading an image that is less then 457 height the program will resize it. If this results in a width that is greater then 400, the image will be cropped on the right side. If the image is greater then 457 height the program will reduce it. The best image to upload is one that has already been resized to a height of 457. To maximize the image on the homepage you can use a program like Photoshop to create an image with the maximum dimensions of 400 x 457.&lt;br /&gt;
# It is possible that a manufacturer’s website will be blocked to not allow you to copy images. In this case it is necessary for you to contact the manufacturer and request a CD of images. Usually the images on a CD are very large whereas the images you copy from a website are already reduced to an Internet ready size. If you get a CD from the manufacturer with very large images please DO NOT attempt to load them. Contact us and we will advise you how to proceed. You may also choose to scan the images if you have the manufacturer’s catalog, but we recommend against this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Next we will discuss the Featured Products Module. If you think of your new eFashionCentral site as your virtual store, the Featured Products Module is your virtual storefront window, where you display the items you want your customer to see first when they view your website. The Featured Products Module will allow you to display two items on the homepage of your site. These items can be something that is popular, or maybe something that isn’t selling too well that you want to move. What ever your motivation for putting these items up, here’s how you do it: When you enter a product into the product manager, that product will be assigned a “product id” (We will explain into the product id when we discuss the Product Manager). To put a product into the Featured Product Module, take the corresponding product id and enter it into either the “left” or “right” box and click submit. In the event that you do not wish to display any products on your homepage, for example if you are having a special event at the store and want the customer to see that instead, click the check box that says “Disable the Featured Products module by checking here,” then you can type the information regarding the special event into the text box and when you are done click the submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:1.jpg&amp;diff=230</id>
		<title>File:1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:1.jpg&amp;diff=230"/>
		<updated>2012-03-23T22:29:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Order_Manager&amp;diff=229</id>
		<title>Order Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Order_Manager&amp;diff=229"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:57:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Order Manager&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This is where your orders will be listed, click on them to view the information they contain.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# That wraps it up for your basic training! Congratulations. Please get working on your site so we can link it up to the manufacturer’s websites as soon as possible. Call me with any questions or concerns.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Order_Manager&amp;diff=228</id>
		<title>Order Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Order_Manager&amp;diff=228"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:53:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: New page: Order Manager 1. This is where your orders will be listed, click on them to view the information they contain.That wraps it up for your basic training! Congratulations. Please get working ...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Order Manager&lt;br /&gt;
1. This is where your orders will be listed, click on them to view the information they&lt;br /&gt;
contain.That wraps it up for your basic training! Congratulations. Please get working on your site so we&lt;br /&gt;
can link it up to the manufacturer’s websites as soon as possible. Call me with any questions or&lt;br /&gt;
concerns.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=227</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=227"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:49:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the General Settings page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information, two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the customer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a email address you check often.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=226</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=226"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:48:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the General Settings page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information, two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the customer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a email address you check often.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=225</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=225"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:47:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the General Settings page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information, two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the customer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=224</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=224"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:46:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the General Settings page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information, two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the customer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=223</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=223"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:45:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the General Settings page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information, two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your&lt;br /&gt;
product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and&lt;br /&gt;
link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the&lt;br /&gt;
customer.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=222</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=222"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:42:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. This will take you to the General Settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The&lt;br /&gt;
two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts&lt;br /&gt;
ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you&lt;br /&gt;
still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to&lt;br /&gt;
allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site&lt;br /&gt;
check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box&lt;br /&gt;
that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on&lt;br /&gt;
your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your&lt;br /&gt;
eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information,&lt;br /&gt;
two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email&lt;br /&gt;
address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to&lt;br /&gt;
you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your&lt;br /&gt;
product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and&lt;br /&gt;
link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the&lt;br /&gt;
customer.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=221</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=221"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:41:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&lt;br /&gt;
2. This will take you to the General Settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The&lt;br /&gt;
two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts&lt;br /&gt;
ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you&lt;br /&gt;
still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to&lt;br /&gt;
allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site&lt;br /&gt;
check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box&lt;br /&gt;
that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on&lt;br /&gt;
your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your&lt;br /&gt;
eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information,&lt;br /&gt;
two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email&lt;br /&gt;
address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to&lt;br /&gt;
you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your&lt;br /&gt;
product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and&lt;br /&gt;
link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the&lt;br /&gt;
customer.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=220</id>
		<title>General Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=General_Settings&amp;diff=220"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:39:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: New page: General Settings 1. Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page. 2. This will take you to the General Settings page. 3. The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will ha...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the General Settings link at the top of the Admin page.&lt;br /&gt;
2. This will take you to the General Settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Ecommerce settings are the main way you will handle ecommerce on your site. The&lt;br /&gt;
two main options are Ecommerce On and Ecommerce Off. Ecommerce Off shuts&lt;br /&gt;
ecommerce off throughout the whole site. Ecommerce On allows for ecommerce but you&lt;br /&gt;
still must check in the Available for Ecommerce check box on each item you wish to&lt;br /&gt;
allow ecommerce for. If you do not wish to make ecommerce available on your site&lt;br /&gt;
check the Ecommerce off box. Then if you wish you can type a message in the text box&lt;br /&gt;
that will appear instead of the “Add to Cart” button. If you wish to allow ecommerce on&lt;br /&gt;
your site check the Ecommerce On button. There are two ways to allow orders on your&lt;br /&gt;
eFashionCentral.com site. One you ask your customers to enter their billing information,&lt;br /&gt;
two you only ask for your customer’ general information (name, phone number, email&lt;br /&gt;
address) and will contact them to receive their billing information. Once again it is up to&lt;br /&gt;
you to verify payment and charge the card. eFashionCentral.com is not a billing service.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Also under Ecommerce Settings there is an option to put the Online Sales Policy on your&lt;br /&gt;
product detail pages. It is highly recommended that you create a Online Sales Policy and&lt;br /&gt;
link to it on your product details page. This helps clear up any confusion for the&lt;br /&gt;
customer.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the Submit button when you are satisfied with your Ecommerce settings.&lt;br /&gt;
6. Under the Ecommerce Settings there is a box that says Change Your Admin Email. This&lt;br /&gt;
email address is where you will receive all correspondence from eFashionCentral.com, as&lt;br /&gt;
well as where you will receive a notification of orders received so make sure this is a&lt;br /&gt;
email address you check often.&lt;br /&gt;
7. When you have entered your email address click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=219</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=219"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:34:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. &#039;&#039;&#039;Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click Here&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature.&#039;&#039;&#039; Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=218</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=218"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:31:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. &#039;&#039;&#039;Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;text-decoration: underline;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click Here&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature.&#039;&#039;&#039; Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=217</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=217"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:23:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;The IMAGE&#039;&#039;&#039; icon is only used to bring &#039;&#039;&#039;JPG&#039;&#039;&#039; images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code. In those cases you will use the same &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;: right click and click Paste. This will put the &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=216</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=216"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:22:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;The IMAGE&#039;&#039;&#039; icon is only used to bring &#039;&#039;&#039;JPG&#039;&#039;&#039; images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code. In those cases you will use the same &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;: right click and click Paste. This will put the &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=215</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=215"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:18:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;The IMAGE&#039;&#039;&#039; icon is only used to bring &#039;&#039;&#039;JPG&#039;&#039;&#039; images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code. In those cases you will use the same &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=214</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=214"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:16:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=213</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=213"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:15:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=212</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=212"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:12:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;ftp://efcftp.com/.&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=211</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=211"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:10:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, &#039;&#039;&#039;PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; files, &#039;&#039;&#039;HMT, HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=210</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=210"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T17:05:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the &#039;&#039;&#039;FULL URL&#039;&#039;&#039;. For example: &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;(http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt; and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=209</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=209"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:55:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under &#039;&#039;&#039;URL&#039;&#039;&#039; (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=208</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=208"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:53:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie.&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;www.eFashionCentral.com&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=207</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=207"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:48:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to view the &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with &#039;&#039;&#039;HTML&#039;&#039;&#039; coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=206</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=206"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:46:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and &amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;Underline&amp;lt;/ins&amp;gt;, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=205</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=205"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:44:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are &#039;&#039;&#039;BOLD&#039;&#039;&#039;, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=204</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=204"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:42:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=203</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=203"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:42:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog.  &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=202</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=202"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:39:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
#* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=201</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=201"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:37:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=200</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=200"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:35:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to. &lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=199</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=199"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:33:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to. &lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=198</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=198"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:30:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages. &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to. &lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=197</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=197"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:29:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy. &lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages. &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to. &lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=196</id>
		<title>Page Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Page_Manager&amp;diff=196"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:27:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Manager&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Page Manager is where you will enter all the information on your site that does not deal with the products. This includes but is not limited to a Contact Us page and an About Us page. To bring up the Page Manager click the Page Manager link at the top of the Admin page.&lt;br /&gt;
# You are now looking at the Page Manager. You will notice that the page manager contains one big box labeled Current Pages.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Current Pages box is broken up into eight sections: About Us, Contact Us, Other1-Other5, and Online Sales Policy. &lt;br /&gt;
# About Us, Contact Us, and Online Sales Policy are more or less self explanatory. Other1-Other5 are your own personal pages for whatever you wish to use them for. Once again these pages are to be used at your own discretion, you by no means are forced to use them, but some good ideas for their use are to announce sales, advertise trunk shows, and/or list customer testimonials or feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
# The About Us and Contact Us pages are mandatory. A good site will always have both of these pages. If you choose to use the Other1-Other5 pages and wish to see them displayed click the check box next to the site you wish to be displayed and click the Set Pages Active/Inactive button. The same goes for the Online Sales Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
# The for all of these pages is the same, so I will only go over one of them and you can apply what you learned to the rest of the pages. &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit link next to the page you wish to edit, for now click the Edit link next to About Us.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Page page. This first thing you should see is Page Title. Make sure you enter a Page Title! If the page title is left blank that page will not be able to be viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have entered a page title, skip where it says “Click here” (We’ll get back to that later) and look at the box under Page Content. Starting at the top you will notice a box that says Normal in it this box contains six different type-face styles you can type in. To the right of that are BOLD, italics, and Underline, buttons, to the right of that are the strikeout, subscript, and superscript buttons, to the right of those are the copy, cut, and paste buttons, on the second line all the way to the left you have the align left, align center, align right and justify buttons, to the right of that you have the numbered list button, the bulleted list button, the decrease indent button, and the increase indent button, to the right of that is the font color box and a preview of what color you are typing in, to the right of that you have the insert horizontal rule button, the insert hyperlink button, the insert picture button, the insert table button, and the switch to HTML button. We’ll get back to the insert picture and insert hyperlink buttons in a moment, the switch to HTML button allows you to view the HTML code for the page, only use this button if you are familiar with HTML coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under these buttons is a large text box, in this text box you will be entering all the information you wish to be displayed on this page. &lt;br /&gt;
# To add a hyperlink to the page first you must find the page you wish to link to (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com)&lt;br /&gt;
# First type the text you wish to appear such as “Click here for driving directions”. Highlight the text and click the insert hyperlink button.&lt;br /&gt;
# A box will appear with the word Hyperlink at the top of it. Enter the wepage address you wish to link to under URL (ie. http://www.mapquest.com) and click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
# The text you had highlighted will not turn blue and be underlined and when you click on it the link will take you to the page you linked to. &lt;br /&gt;
# Now to adding pictures. This process can be hard so I will take you step by step through it. &lt;br /&gt;
* First look at the text right above the Page Content box (Click here to upload pictures, copy them to this folder, use the image button on the toolbar below to insert them with the FULL URL. For example: http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/imagename.jpg) highlight the red portion of this text up to imagename.jpg (http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/) and right click on it and click copy.&lt;br /&gt;
* You know have to access your ftp file (this is the place where all of your images file, PDF files, HMT, HTML or any other type of Internet files are stored on the Internet). If you are using Internet Explorer 6 or Firefox you simply have to click on the link that says “Click here.” This will bring up a folder named ftp://efcftp.com/. Copy into this folder all the pictures or files you wish to use on a page on your website. Give the pictures easy to remember names, and for your sake make them all lowercase letters. Once you have put the picture(s) that you wish to use in the folder close the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* If clicking Click here gave you access to the ftp then skip this section. If you are not using Explorer 6 or Firefox you will have noticed that you are not able to access the ftp. You can try using the instructions right there on your Page Manager for Internet Explorer &lt;br /&gt;
# If this does not work you may have some kind of security protection that is blocking you from gaining access. In rare instances you may have to use an ftp software program; there are many free ftp software products available on the Internet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Click the Insert Image button on the Page Content toolbar. This will bring up a box that says Insert Image – Web Page Dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The IMAGE icon is only used to bring JPG images that you have uploaded to your ftp to your website. Other files such as PDF or wave files need to be linked to you’re your website using either the Link icon or straight HTML code. In those cases you will use the same URL, using the appropriate suffix or the file you are uploading, i.e. /filename.pdf .&lt;br /&gt;
* In the box that says Image URL: right click and click Paste. This will put the http://www.efcftp.com/users/(yourusername)/ftp/ into the box after the forward slash (/) type in the name of the image you wish to add (ie.myfancypicture.jpg) remember this is CaSe SenSItive so remember to either name your pictures with all lowercase letters or remember the location of the capitol letters in the name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click in the box that says Alternate text: and enter the name of the picture (ie. myfancypicture)&lt;br /&gt;
* Press the tab key five times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The picture will then appear in the Page Content text box&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Submit button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=195</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=195"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:23:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. &#039;&#039;&#039;Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature.&#039;&#039;&#039; Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=194</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=194"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:17:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. &#039;&#039;&#039;Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=193</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=193"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:14:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. &#039;&#039;&#039;Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=192</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=192"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:11:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=191</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=191"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:07:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading. If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=190</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=190"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:06:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading. If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or collections you have selected.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both&lt;br /&gt;
methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time&lt;br /&gt;
managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=189</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=189"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:04:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading. If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use&lt;br /&gt;
these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a&lt;br /&gt;
different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a&lt;br /&gt;
customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or&lt;br /&gt;
collections you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both&lt;br /&gt;
methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time&lt;br /&gt;
managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=188</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=188"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:02:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading. If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail images 1 and 2.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not&lt;br /&gt;
listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description&lt;br /&gt;
and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use&lt;br /&gt;
these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a&lt;br /&gt;
different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a&lt;br /&gt;
customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or&lt;br /&gt;
collections you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both&lt;br /&gt;
methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time&lt;br /&gt;
managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=187</id>
		<title>Manage Products</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://support.estylecentral.com/wiki/index.php?title=Manage_Products&amp;diff=187"/>
		<updated>2012-03-21T16:01:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ellaine: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Manage Products&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Welcome to the Product Manager, this is where you will be adding all of your products to the categories/collections you just created. In the main product manager page you will see this heading:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Manager Overview | Add a Product | Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039; There are two methods of adding products in the product manager, I will start with the easier one. First we will upload images to a collection that is on our preloaded database. To do this you click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Manufacturer Products&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will open up a menu with two drop-down boxes. The first drop-down box has the list of collections that are available. You can only use this method of adding products for the collections that are listed here. Next you will select the Collection name from the second drop down bar where it says: &#039;&#039;&#039;To My Collection:&#039;&#039;&#039; You must always complete this step before adding products or the program will warn you that you have not selected a collection to add the products to. Note that there is sometimes important information about the upload; be sure to carefully read what is there VERY CAREFULLY. For example, it may indicate that the prices that are listed are MSRP and not cost prices. This is important to note as it will determine what needs to be done to convert the price top your retail if you plane to show a retail price on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Now click on the Submit. This will bring up a list of thumbnail images for the collection that line in a new window. &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: If you have a pop-up blocker active on your browser this may keep the window from opening, if this is the case, please turn your pop-up blocker off before you begin any work on eFashionCentral.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the new window you will see the pictures of each item in the line with a check box above each item. Place a check above each of the items you wish to add, if you wish to add every item in the line click the link on the far left side that says “Check all” Note: You should always review ALL the thumbnails before you click Check all to be sure that you want to upload everything. Also read the details so you can be sure of what you are uploading. If you are adding most of the items you can also click “Check all” and then click the check box above the picture to uncheck the items you don’t want. There is also a button to indicate if you want to upload Cost prices. As indicated above, it is possible that the manufacturer provided MSRP rather then cost prices. If the upload indicated that they were MSRP then designating that you want to upload “cost prices” will actually upload the MSRP. You will still be able to adjust the MSRP to whatever you desire, but the images will initially upload with the MSRP price. If there are no dollar amounts under the thumbnail, then that manufacturer has not provided us with any cost or MSRP information.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished checking all of the items you wish to add (or have clicked Check all) click the Add Styles button. Important: If you are uploading multiple seasons to the same Collection name you will want to upload the newest season’s image last and make sure that the Collection is set for “Newest First” (see Manager Collections/Categories #8 above). This way when you add new seasons to this collection in the future they will always appear first on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# AT THIS POINT A NEW SCREEN APPEARS THAT ALERTS YOU THAT YOU HAVE (or may have) UPLOADED COST PRICES. AT SOME POINT YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE SEPARATE, “APPLY SCREEN INSTRUCTIONS”. When you are ready you can &#039;&#039;&#039;Click Here&#039;&#039;&#039; to access very detailed Apply screen Instructions. We strongly recommend that you read these instructions very carefully. For now just continue with the tutorial so you can get through the basics.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Besides converting the cost price to your retail price, you can also go to this screen to make other changes on the products you have uploaded. If you plan to upload more images to this particular collection then you should close this window. When you have everything uploaded then click “Go There Now” on this window so you can apply the changes to everything you have uploaded to this collection.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# If you plan to continue to add images to this particular Collection name by selecting another collection from the database (for example images from different seasons for the same Collection name) then you should close the window and continue to add all the collections first before going to the Apply Settings Function. So for example, if you want to upload three seasons of a collection all to the same collection name then you can select each collection in succession. Once you have uploaded everything to this particular Collection Name, THEN click “Go There Now” on the Apply Function Screen.&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can access the Apply Screen anytime by going to Manage Products, selecting a Collection or Category Name from the drop down, click submit and then click the Apply Settings to All Items in this Col/Cat that appears at the top. NOTE that the Apply screen is ALWAYS blank, it does not ‘know’ what is already uploaded for the Col/Cat you have selected. It is waiting for you to tell it what to do with what is already uploaded.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now take a look at one of the products you just added. To do this you need to click Product Manager again on the top menu bar and select the Collection name that you added the images to and click Submit. You will see the thumbnails of all the images that you just uploaded. Note: the images will always appear in Style# sequence. You can search for a particular style by using the style search feature. Next to each thumbnail you will see, the item’s Product ID (This is the same product ID you will need to use in the Featured Products Module), the Style Number, The Product Price, and the Product Headline. Once again, to place an item in your featured products module in the Manage Home Page section copy the product id number and paste it into one of the text boxes marked left or right.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under all this information is a link that says edit. Click on the edit link.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will bring you to the Edit Product page. Each Item has an edit product page associated with it. This is where you will put in all the information regarding the particular item you are working on.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The first thing you will notice at the top of the page is the Main Image. The Main Image is the image that will be shown on your actual eFashionCentral.com site. It will be shown as a link and it will be the main image your potential customers will see when they click the link for that product. When dealing with a product uploaded from a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database it is important that you do not change the Main Image, this is because the main image is what allows the product to directly link from the manufacturer’s website. If you are dealing with a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database you must put an image there, but we will get into that more in-depth when we discuss entering products that are not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the main image are 3 other image boxes. These boxes are purely optional and are utilized depending on how you personally wish your site to look and feel. The first of these boxes is the Zoom of Main Image box. This box is used if you have a larger picture of the item than the picture that is in the main image. The picture in the main image is usually 457 height, however some preloaded images are larger. When you are uploading images using Add a Product, all images should be no higher then 700 height, the program will reduce the main image to 457 height. The main image should be no wider then 300 once it is reduced to 457 height. You may have to play around with this a little to get the maximum image displayed on your website. If you would like to upload a larger image in the zoom image you should use an image that is 700 height, it can be any width. When this image is uploaded the option to ‘enlarge above image’ will appear below the image on your style page. If this is clicked a pop-up window will open with a larger view of the image. You do not have to upload an image to the Zoom image section so just ignore that browse button. The program will automatically add the Zoom image for you if the image you uploaded to the Main Image is larger then 457 pixels tall..&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# The third and fourth boxes are the Detail Images 1&amp;amp;2. These images are meant to show a detail shot (ie. If there is some embroidery you wish to show close-up) or a shot of the back of the item. To enter an image into either of these two boxes the process is the same as the Zoom of Main Image box, just save the file you wish to use to your hard drive and click the Browse button. A Choose file box will appear, select the file you wish to use and click the Open button. These files that you upload will then be displayed under the main image on your eFashionCentral.com website. The detail images should be no more then 700 height, they can be any width.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the image boxes is the option to allow this item for ecommerce. Now we will take a step back and make some fairly big decisions regarding ecommerce. There are many ways to utilize your eFashionCentral.com site, not all of them involve ecommerce. We will now go over the ways an eFashionCentral.com site owner can use their site in order from no ecommerce to heavy ecommerce.&lt;br /&gt;
#* No ecommerce at all: This option allows you to use the site purely as a tool to advertise your store. This option does not allow for any kind of ecommerce at all, but encourages your potential customers to come to the store to purchase your wares. This option increases the face to face customer/salesperson relationship, but decreases the likelihood of a sale from anywhere but a reasonable proximity to your store. To turn of ecommerce universally for the whole site click on the General Settings link at the very top of the admin page and click the box that says Ecommerce Off under the Ecommerce settings part of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on some items, not all: This option allows you to sell low-ticket items online, especially items that do not need to be tried on such as accessories or gift certificates. This is the perfect segway into more ecommerce heavy options. This option allows you to be comfortable with ecommerce and still maintain a low degree of headaches as far as shipping and customer needs are concerned. To turn on ecommerce for only certain items first make sure that under your ecommerce settings in General Settings, Ecommerce on is checked, then when editing products check the box for Ecommerce On the Edit Product screen for the items which you wish to sell online.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ecommerce on all items: This option allows potential customers to order any or all of the items listed on your site. To set this option on go to your General Settings and make sure that the Ecommerce On box is checked, then leave the Ecommerce On box checked for every item on your site. There are two ways for you to receive orders which can be set up in the General Settings page. One is to allow customers to enter their credit card information, the other is to not ask for credit card information to be entered. First and foremost, eFashionCentral.com does not bill any credit cards. It is up to you once you receive the credit card information to then verify the credit card and then bill the card. If you choose not to ask the customer to enter their credit card information, it is up to you to contact the customer and get the credit card information over the phone. I will go over Ecommerce again once we get to the General Settings portion of the tutorial.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Available for Ecommerce check box the style number is listed. If you are using a Manufacturer’s Preloaded Database the style number will already be entered. If you are editing a product not from a manufacturers preloaded database, you will have to enter the style number yourself.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Short Description. The short description is just that, two or three words describing the item that will appear at the top of the item description page on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now we have the Price. Enter the price that you wish to sell the item for. If you do not wish to list a price, leave the price box at 0.00 and no price will appear on your website.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Colors. To enter the colors type in the color or color combination in one of the boxes. The colors will be shown on your website in a drop down box.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sizes. Check the Sizes you wish to list on your website. We realize that in some cases larger sizes also come with an increase in price. If this is the case, do not check the check box for that size and instead enter it in one of the eight boxes with the additional amount. (ie. 32 +$50.00) Another way to do this is to create a unique style # for the style in the sizes that are a higher price, ie., 12345PL. Then create a new Collection designating the special size, ie., Montage 20 – 36; you can also create a new Category ie., MOB Plus Sizes. This way your larger customer can shop for styles that she can purchase without being reminded that she has to pay more. You can also activate a link from the Missy Main image to the Plus size Main image by putting a link in the Main image of the Missy style to the Main image of the Plus style.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the size listings is a drop down box where you can select a size chart. We have a sizable amount of size charts but do not have all of the size charts you may need. If there is a size chart you need please just fax it or email it to us and we will have it up as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Next up is the Full Description, a full description of the item. Things to remember to put in the full description: Explain any detail not visible in the picture and if the picture does not show the back of the dress please remember to describe the back of the dress to potential customers.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Full Description there is a list of every collection and category you have created thus far. Click on the check boxes next to the category or collection you wish to add this item to. You can add it to as many collection and categories as you wish. (ie. If you have a Jovani Prom dress you might wish to add that dress to Jovani, Jovani Prom, and Prom)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the list of Collections/Categories there are four boxes, Link 1 Title, Link1 URL, Link 2 Title, and Link 2 URL. If for any reason you wish to add a link to your product details page on your website enter the website address (ie. www.eFashionCentral.com) in either the Link 1 URL, or the Link 2 URL. Then enter what you wish the link to read (ie. The Best Page in The Universe) in either Link 1 Title or Link 2 Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# When you are done edit the product, check over your information then click the Submit button.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Now that we’ve covered adding products from a manufacturer’s preloaded database, we’ll go over how to add a product that is not from a manufacturer’s preloaded database. First choose a category/collection to manage its products. Then click the blue arrow next to Add a Product.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# This will open the Add a Product part of the Product manager. You will no doubt notice the similarities of this screen and the edit product screen. Most of the information you are going to enter on this screen is the same information you would have entered on the edit products page. The main difference is you will have to find a picture of the item on the Internet or take your own picture of the item and scan it into your computer. Then you will click the browse button next to Main Image find that image on your computer and click open, which will save that picture as your main image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Decide if you wish to add a Zoom of the Main Image, and if you wish to use the detail&lt;br /&gt;
images 1 and 2.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the box if you wish to make that item available for ecommerce. Enter the style&lt;br /&gt;
number of the product, the short description, the price, the colors, and the sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a size chart for that item. If the size chart for a particular manufacturer is not&lt;br /&gt;
listed, please inform us and we will get it up as soon as possible. Enter a full description&lt;br /&gt;
and select the categories or collections you wish to add this item to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The links in the style edit screen are for advanced applications. One somple way to use&lt;br /&gt;
these is to redirect a customer to another page on your website where they can shop for a&lt;br /&gt;
different size category, ie. The Plus size info on the same style. You can also direct a&lt;br /&gt;
customer to the image of a complementary accessory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, click the Submit button. This will add this product to the categories or&lt;br /&gt;
collections you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Practice adding items using both methods. It is imperative that you are familiar with both&lt;br /&gt;
methods of adding products because this is where you will spend most of your time&lt;br /&gt;
managing your site, especially when a new line comes out.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ellaine</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>